Canon | IXUS 265 HS | User guide | Canon IXUS 265 HS User guide

Canon IXUS 265 HS User guide
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺴﻢ ”ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٦‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫• ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪©CANON INC. 2014‬‬
‫‪CEL-SV3HA2N1‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺃﻳًّﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺯﻋﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﻮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CB-2LF/CB-2LFE‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪NB-11LH‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ )= ‪.(٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SD‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SDHC‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SDXC‬‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺘﻨﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫˼‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫̂‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫˽‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫˹˺‬
‫˾‬
‫˺˺‬
‫˿‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫˻˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫˼˺‬
‫̀‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫́‬
‫˽˺‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(< ‪) j> /‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(<‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ّ i>:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) k>:‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(< ‪) g> /‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(<‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪*(N-Mark‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫* ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪.(٨٩ =) NFC‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫=‪ :xx‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ “xx” ،‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻼءﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺗُﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻼﻫﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪) AV OUT‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ HDMITM‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) 1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(<‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) b‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(< ‪/‬‬
‫> )‪ / <(Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ / <(Macro) e‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ(<‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪FUNC./SET‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) h‬ﻓﻼﺵ(< ‪ /‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) l‬ﻋﺮﺽ(< ‪ /‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<n‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <o‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫>‪ <q‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫>‪ <r‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ‪ ١١‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫>‪ <p‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ‪ ١٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪٢......................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ‪٢............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ‪٢........‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪٣........................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪٤....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪٥.....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٦...................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪١٠ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪١٤ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪١٨ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٨.................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٢٦ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ‪٣١ ........................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٣٥ ........................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ‪٣٧ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٣٨ .........................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪٤١...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪٩ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪٢٥.............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪١٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪٢٠ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٠ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢١ .......................... FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪٢٢ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪٢٣ ........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪٢٣ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪٢٤ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪٤٢ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪٤٣ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪٤٨ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪٥١........................................... P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪٥٢ .......... ([P‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٥٢ ......‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٥٥ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪٥٧ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٦١ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪٦٢ ....................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪٦٤.......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٦٥ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪٦٨ .....................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٠ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٢ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٤ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٦ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ‪٧٧ ..................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪٧٨ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٨١ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪٨٣............................Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪٨٤ ....... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ‪٨٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٨٩ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٩٠ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٩٢ ....................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ‪٩٣ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ‪٩٨ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪١٠٠ .........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٠١ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٠٣ ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{< ‪١٠٤ ........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪١٠٦ ...................... (Image Sync‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٠٧ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪١٠٨ ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪١٠٩ .............‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪١١١....................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪١١٢ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪١١٨........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪١١٩ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٢٠ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪١٢١ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪١٢٥ .................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٧ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‪١٣٦...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪١٣٧ ..................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪١٤٠ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪١٤٣ .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪١٤٥ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪١٥٢ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪١٥٣ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪١٥٧ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ‪١٥٩ ...‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪٥٨ ،٤٢ ،٢٦............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪٦٢ ،٣٣ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻛﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪٤٩ ،٣٢ ...............................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ( ‪٢٨ ،٢٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ( ‪٤٤ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٢٦.......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪٦٨ ................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٤ ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪١٢١.......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪٧٠ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ‬
‫)= ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ )ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪٢٨ .............................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪٦٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪٣٤ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٤٣‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪٦٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٢٦ .............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٧............................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٤٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫)= ‪(٤٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ‬
‫)= ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٤٧‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫)= ‪(٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺒﻞ‪١٢٦...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪٨٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪٨٦ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٠٦..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻗﺎﻳﺘﻚ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻭﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻔﻪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ( ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺒﺼﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻬﺐ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛ ّﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﺴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎء ﻏﺰﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺣﻆ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘ ﱠﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ً‬
‫ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻄﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻠﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺣﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺮﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﻣﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺰﻋﺎﺝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻄﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻜﻚ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺟﺮﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺤﺸﺎﺭ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺧﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺘﻚ ﺑﺠﺮﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﻀﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺪﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺘﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﻏﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﻭ– ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺠﻠﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻄﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪١٠......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪١٤..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ‪١٠ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٠ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٠ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪١١ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪١٢ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٤ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪١٤ ................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٦ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻮﻁ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ‪ S‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ) (‬
‫ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ) (‪.‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :CB-2LF l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ) ( ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪ :CB-2LFE l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪CB-2LF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺼﻤﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪CB-2LFE‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ) ( ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫• ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“ )= ‪.(١٥٤‬‬
‫• ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺣﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫)‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫˺‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺤﻪ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺘﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪ 4:3‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(١٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ )= ‪.(٣٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[3‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<o><p‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪(١٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼً‪ ،(١٢٠ = ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(١٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[3‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[4‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<o><p‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﺨﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪ <i‬ﱠ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪) <j‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<r‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<o><p‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[a‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓً ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )= ‪.(٧٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪١٩..........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪١٩ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪٢٠...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٠................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢١................................................FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪٢٢..........................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٢٣.............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪٢٣...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪٢٤....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ )= ‪.(١١٤‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ (٨٣ =) Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )= ‪.(١٢٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“ )= ‪.(١٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪) .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )= ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ (١٤٧ – ١٤٦‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )= ‪.(١٥٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<r‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <r‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<q‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١١٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‪ ،[4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ ،[1‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )= ‪.(١٥١ – ١٤٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<n‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١١٧‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ .(٩٢ =) Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻬﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪ (٣‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺾ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )= ‪ (١٢٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )= ‪(١١٤ ،١١٣ ،١٩‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٥٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٦...................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٣٥...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٣٨................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪٢٦ ................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‪٢٨ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪٣٠ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٣٠ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪٣١ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٣٥ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ( ‪٣٥ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪٣٦ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪٣٦ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪٣٨ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪٣٩ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٣٩ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪٣١..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ‪٣١ ..........‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪٣٢ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٣٣ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪٣٤ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٣٤ ...........................................................‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‪٣٧.....................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‪٣٧ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪٣٧ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ‪٣٨ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﺨﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪ <i‬ﱠ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪) <j‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[4‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٣‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪“(Smart Auto‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٢٦‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(٢٦ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺟﺰء ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻫﻲ ] [ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(١١٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬‫ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺤﻤﻴًﺎ )= ‪(٧٢‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )= ‪ (١٣‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١١٣‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )= ‪.(١١٦‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ ◄ (٢٢‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [4‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ◄ ]ﺑﻼ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪.(٨٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٦٧‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺗﺎ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<p‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‪ [h‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ*‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻇﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ* )ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ (٥١ =) [G‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺸﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺻﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ*‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ )‪.(Hybrid IS‬‬
‫[ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ )ﻓﻌّﺎﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪) .‬ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪(IS‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ .(٦٣‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.IS‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ( ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٨‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ (٥١ =) [G‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪.<i‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ )ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻪ ً‬
‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪<i‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪ :‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‬‫)‪.(ZoomPlus‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ :‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )= ‪ ،(٣٥‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٢٢ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪◄ [4‬‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫)ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]][ )= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]][‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ][[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ][[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[$‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٣٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ ،[$‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫]ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.[$‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ[ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ[ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<r‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]![‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]![‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘًﺎ )= ‪.(١٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.(٢١ =) [W‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.[W‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫[‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )= ‪(١٢٧‬‬‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪ (١٣١‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪(١٢٥‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪ 4:3‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(١٥٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )=‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١٨٠ × ١٣٠‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١٣٠ × ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪(4:3‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ ٤٢٠) A2‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ ٥٩٤‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪× ٢٩٧) A3 – A5‬‬
‫‪ ٢١٠ × ١٤٨ − ٤٢٠‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫‪ ١٨٠ × ١٣٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠ × ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪]l‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.[R‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺳﺎءﺓ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻴﻮﻥ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٨٠‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺧﻄﻮﻁ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﻜﺒﱢﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪[AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻛﻬﺪﻑ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻻ‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ً‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﻮﻋﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ :(٣١‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬‫ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪ :(٥٨ =) AF‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ )= ‪(١٢١‬‬‫• ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻷﻋﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [4‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ MENU‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ“ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪[AF-‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺨﺼﺎ ﺑﺄﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[$‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺻﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫]ﺍﺣﻔﻆ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ )= ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪.(٣٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.(٢٢ =) <m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺳﺮﻳﻊ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ 4 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﺣﻔﻆ[ )= ‪.(٣٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(١٤٤‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ )= ‪ (٣٩‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺳﺮﻳﻊ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪(٧٢‬‬‫ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪(٧٧‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ )= ‪(٧٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪٤٢............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ‪٤٣................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‪٤٤ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ(‪٤٥ ......‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ( ‪٤٦ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ( ‪٤٧ ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٤٧ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪٤٨...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٤٨ .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ( ‪٥٠ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ( ‪٥٠ .........‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪.[4‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[4‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﻃﻮﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ P‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺠﻴﺔ )ﺛﻠﺞ(‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪(٤٢‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫•‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺤﺒﺐ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (٥٤ =) ISO‬ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[t‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ(‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻤﻨﺤﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ )= ‪.(٢٦‬‬
‫• ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﻫﻲ ] [ )‪ (2304 x 1728‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[t‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ(‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ )ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺟﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ )= ‪ ،(٧٤‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ )= ‪ (٦٩‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ )= ‪.(٦٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (٧٢‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ (٦٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ .(٧١‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )= ‪ (٧٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ )= ‪ (٧٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪ (٧٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )= ‪ (٨٠ – ٧٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (١٢٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (١٣١‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ )= ‪ .(١٣٤‬ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ )= ‪ (٦٩‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ )= ‪ً (٦٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ً‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻑ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻟﻄﻴﻒ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤٢‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<p‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ )ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤٢‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ُﻋﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<o><p‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ ،<o><p‬ﻭﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻲ ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ] [‬
‫)= ‪ .(٣٥‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻭﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ( ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﺌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺼﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<p‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<p‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤٢‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤٢‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺒﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٤٢‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺴﻤًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<q‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺒﺴﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻨﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺴﻢ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻓﻤﻬﻢ ﺑﻮﺳﻊ ٍ‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ (٣٨‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻤﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٤٢‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻏﻤﺰ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻤﺰﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺘﺄﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻏﻤﺰ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺒﻂء‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﻥ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻐﻤﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ (٣٨‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺟﺪ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﻴﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻤﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ .(٥٨‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٤٢‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<p‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻀﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪) .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ‪ (.‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻀﻤﺎﻣﻚ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )= ‪ (٣٨‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ“‬
‫)= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[N‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤٢‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[N‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤٢‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻊ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ١٫٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]![ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )= ‪.(٦٢‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )= ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ] [ )‪ (١٧٢٨ x ٢٣٠٤‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ [G‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[4‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[G‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬؛ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪ ،[G‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ )= ‪.(١٥٠ – ١٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪٥٢................................ ([P‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٥٢.............................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪٥٢ .........................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٥٣ .......................... (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪٥٣ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٥٤ ..........................................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٥٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٥٥.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٦١....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٥٥ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ‪٥٦ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٦١ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٦٢ ................................................ FE‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪٥٧.................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪٦٢...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )‪٥٧ .......................................... (Macro‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ )ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ( ‪٥٧ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪٥٧ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪٥٨ ....................................................... AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪٦٠ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٦١ ................................................ AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٦٢ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪٦٣ .....................................................IS‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪([P‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪.[G‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٤٢‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[G‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٦٣ – ٥٢‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (٥٤ =) ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ‪ ،(٦١ = ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ [G‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ (٢١ =) FUNC.‬ﻭ‪ (٢٢ =) MENU‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[G‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ١/٣‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+2‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<o‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﱠﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]&[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]&[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،AE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]&[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻛﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺿﻤﻦ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ ،(AE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪200 ،100‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪800 ،400‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]@[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪3200 ،1600‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻐﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٨٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ ،(WB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )=‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻐﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Tungsten‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻫﺠﺔ )‪ (tungsten‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻱ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ(‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‬
‫‪Fluorescent H‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٥٥‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ؛ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )=‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻟﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻟﻄﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻛﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﻖ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻤﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺒﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ ﱡ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺴﺒﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪.٥ – ١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )= ‪ (٥٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻄﻴﻦ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺸﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(“ )= ‪ (٥٦‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪.<n‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻗﻮﻯ‪/‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺿﻌﻒ‪/‬ﺃﻓﺘﺢ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ )ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )‪(Macro‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[u‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[e‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<q‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[u‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.[u‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<q‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[e‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.[e‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ]‪ [e‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ][[‬
‫)= ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١٫٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٫٠‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٣١‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪.(٣٧ =) AF‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪ <i‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(“ )= ‪.(٣١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )= ‪ (٦٠‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻲء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﺄﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫• ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )] [ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪(٥٨=) “AF‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<q‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‬
‫ﺫﻱ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( )= ‪.(٦٠‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ )= ‪ (٦٠‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[4‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ]‪ [e‬ﻭ]‪.[u‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<q‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪ [4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺻﻐﻴﺮ[ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪ (٣١‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪.(٥٧‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ (٣٧ =) [AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ً .‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[4‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺠﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<q‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.[%‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <q‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]‪ [%‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<r‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫] [ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [h‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪ [Z‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺑﻄﺊ ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[Z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ ،[Z‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫]![ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،(٥٣ =) AE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(٦١ =) [h‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]([‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،FE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]([ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ] [ )ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ( ﻭ] [ )ﺩﻗﻴﻖ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪ ٤:٣‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪.(١٥٤‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )=‪.(٢١‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ ،[IS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ [IS‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ( )= ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ*‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ[ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻣﻨﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻅ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪“IS‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٦٣‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[IS‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [2‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﺗﺼﻔﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٦٥...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٢............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪٧٨....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٦٦ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪٦٧ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٧٢ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪٧٢ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‪٧٣ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪٧٣ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪٦٨ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ‪٦٨ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪٦٩ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٤.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٧٨ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ‪٧٨ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ‪٧٩ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٨٠ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪٨٠ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪٧٤ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪٨١.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ ‪٦٨...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٠..................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٧٠ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٧٠ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٧١ ................‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٧٦.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٧٦ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٧٦ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ‪٧٧.........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٨٢ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫>‪ <m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<r‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<o><p‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٢٢ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [1‬ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٢٢ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،(٢٢ =) MENU‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [1‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ )= ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺘﻢ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (٦٦‬ﻫﻮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪.(١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪،Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ .(١٠٧‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪) (UTC‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﺘﻘﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ً [---‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﻨﺘﺶ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
‫• ‪) Coordinated Universal Time :UTC‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٢٨‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫[ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (٧٢‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ )= ‪ (٧٤‬ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪ <g‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫>‪ .<k‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪.(٧٧‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٢٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ )= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺜﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫• ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪” (٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ“‬
‫)=‪ ،(٦٨‬ﻭ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )=‪ ،(٧٠‬ﻭ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ“ )=‪ .(٧٠‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )=‪ (٧٢‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“ )=‪ (٧٤‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ (١٣١=) “(DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ“ )=‪.(١٣٤‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )= ‪ ،(٨١ – ٧٨‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٥٠ ،٤٤‬ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺳﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑـ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<m‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،(٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ“ )= ‪(٦٨‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ .(٧٠‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ”ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ (٧٢‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“ )= ‪ (٧٤‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (١٣١ =) “(DPOF‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ“ )= ‪ ،(١٣٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٢٢ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [1‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫)ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ(“ )= ‪ (٤٤‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪.<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ ٍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [.‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫]ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ٍ‬
‫ﺑﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪ <k‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻀﺨﻴﻤﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10x‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ >‪.<g‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪ (١٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ .<q><r‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ ،(٦٨‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [1‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ]ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﱟ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬‫ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ )= ‪(٦٨‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )= ‪(٦٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌَﺮَﺿﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٧٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [:‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ .(٢١‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﻤﺖ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [:‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪.(١١٥‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [1‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٧٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﺂﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٧٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٧٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻓﺘﺢ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ“ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑـ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )= ‪.(٧٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [a‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )= ‪.(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“ )= ‪ ،(٧٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“ )= ‪ ،(٧٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮ ًﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ“ )= ‪ (٧٣‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ“‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ )= ‪.[ ] (٧٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٧٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]\[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]\[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٧٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ً ،<r‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ (٧٦‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ ،(٧١‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )=‪ ،(٦٥‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )=‪ ،(٧٠‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )=‪ ،(٧٢‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )=‪،(٧٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪ ،(١٣١=) (DPOF‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ )=‪(١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [1‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫( ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﺠﻮﻡ )‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 8‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Windows 7‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .Windows Vista‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪ (٨٠ – ٧٨‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٣٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻛـ ]‬
‫[ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [1‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<n‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪.<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(٧٨‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(“ )= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(٧٨‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٣٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻘﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫)= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ( ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺌﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺤﺒﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ٍ‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(٧٠‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(٧٨‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]*[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )= ‪،(٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]*[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﺼﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺺ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﻣﻦ ] [( ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺺ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻓﻲ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻗﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻘﻂ ً‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺬﺕ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼً‪.(١٢٠ = ،‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ( )= ‪ (٢٨‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(“‬
‫)= ‪ (٦٧‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪٨٤........................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٩٢............................................. Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‪١٠٤................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪٨٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٨٥ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٨٥ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ‪٨٥ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪٨٦ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪٩٢ ............................................. Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪٩٢ .....................................................Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‪١٠٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Image Sync‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{< ‪١٠٥ ......................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪١٠٥ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪٩٣ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪٩٤ .............................WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٩٧ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪١٠٦................... (Image Sync‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪٨٦....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪٨٧ .....................CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪٨٩ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪٨٩.......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٩٠..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪٩٠ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪٩١ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪٩١ ..........................................................‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ‪٩٣..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ‪٩٨.............................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪٩٩ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪١٠٠................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٠١..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ‪١٠٢ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٠٣......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪١٠٦ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٠٧ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٠٧.......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٠٨.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ‪١٠٩..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪١٠٩ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪١١٠ ...............‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ®‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ ،(٩٢ =) Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ .*GATEWAY‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫* ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻤﻦ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ”ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٥٩‬ﻭ”ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ“ )= ‪.(١٦٠‬‬
‫• ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪GATEWAY‬‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫˼‬
‫‪ ،SNS‬ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ )= ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪*(١٠١‬‬
‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻻ ”ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪App Store/‬‬
‫‪Google Play‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(٨٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )= ‪ (٩٨‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪(١٠١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )= ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ )= ‪(٩١‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪(٩١ = ،‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )= ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺩﻋﻢ ‪ (DPS over IP‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫˻ ˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )= ‪ (٩٨‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫˻ ˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )= ‪(١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪(١٠١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ )‪ ،Microsoft Internet Explorer‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ ،GATEWAY‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ )‪.(http://www.canon.com/cig/‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺑًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻔﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪ (ISP‬ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ُﺗ َ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪ ،http://www.canon.com/cig/‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﺑﻚ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻀﻮ )ﻣﺠﺎ ًﻧﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،٩‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٨‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٩٢‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ )= ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑـ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ WPS‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ [WPS‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٦‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٧‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(٩٥ – ٩٤ =) “WPS‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻭﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ )= ‪ (١٠٦‬ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ“ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(٨٩ =) ٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً )= ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ (٨٧ =) “GATEWAY‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،(٩٢ =) Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻲ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ‪ Android‬ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 4.0‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ( ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪،NFC‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ NFC‬ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ N-Mark‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ) ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ‬
‫‪ Google Play‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ‪ Android‬ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪ ،Google Play‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPad‬ﺃﻭ ‪،iPod touch‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ‪،App Store‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫)= ‪.(٩٨ ،٩٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻡ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬‫ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ )ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤُﻀﻤﱠﻨﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.( ) N-Mark‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪Windows 8/8.1‬‬
‫‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫‪Mac OS‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.9‬‬
‫‪ Mac OS X 10.8.2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.7‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﻳﻦ ‪ Windows 7 Starter‬ﻭ‪.Home Basic‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) Windows 7 N‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ( ﻭ‪) KN‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻮﺭﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ‪ Windows Media Feature Pack‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪.http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﻬﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[ ◄ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[ ◄‬
‫]‪◄ [CameraWindow] ◄ [Canon Utilities‬‬
‫]‪/Wi-Fi connection setup‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻓﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ )ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ( ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ )ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ( ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪.(ICMP‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪.(UPnP‬‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭًﺍ )= ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ً ١٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٢٢ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<o‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ )= ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭﺍ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤًﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<o‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<o><p‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ ،<q><r‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ◄ (٢٢ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪[3‬‬
‫◄ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )‪(SSID/ESSID‬‬
‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ESSID‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﺗُﻌﺮﻑ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑـ ”ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”‪.(١٥٣ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫)ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫○ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫○ ‪) WEP‬ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ(‬
‫○ )‪WPA-PSK (TKIP‬‬
‫○ )‪WPA-PSK (AES‬‬
‫○ )‪WPA2-PSK (TKIP‬‬
‫○ )‪WPA2-PSK (AES‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ‪ /‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ WEP‬ﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫○‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ )‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS‬‬
‫ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﻟـ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫• ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ”ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ“‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ ◄ (٢٢‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪.[MAC‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪WPS‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ‪ WPS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(٩٢ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]{[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻢ[ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ ،<o><p‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ )= ‪ ،(٩٨‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.[WPS‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ،[WPS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪.[PBC‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ ،[PBC‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WPS‬ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ٍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ]{[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١٢‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ‪ Android‬ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٤٫٠‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ( ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪،NFC‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ NFC‬ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ N-Mark‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ) ‪ (٨٩ = ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ً‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﺎ ﺫﻛﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١٢‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٩‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫”ﺍﺑﺪﺃ“ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )= ‪ (١٠٧‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )= ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٠١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“ )= ‪ (١٠٣‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ .USB‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٢٧‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .١١‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١١‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٤‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ [PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٦‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪.(٩٤ =) “WPS‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٩‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ُﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(٩٤ =) “WPS‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ )= ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ]{[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ [2‬ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ “WPS‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(٩٥ =) ٩‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ “WPS‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪١٢‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٩٦‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٦‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٢‬‬
‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]*[ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻴﻦ )= ‪.(١٠٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(٩٢ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]{[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[2‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪) SSID‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ‪ Android‬ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٤٫٠‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ( ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪،NFC‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ‪ NFC‬ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ N-Mark‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ) ‪ (٨٩ = ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )= ‪ (١٠٧‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )= ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٠١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ .USB‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٢٧‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٧‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٧‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (٢٢ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] ◄ [3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ[ ◄ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪.(٩٨‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ “WPS‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.(٩٤ =) ٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﱠﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(٩٢ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]‪ ،[4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪.(١٠١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٣‬ﻭﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻻً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١٠٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ )ﺣﺠﻢ( ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﺃﻭﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ .(٣ =) Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻴﺪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،١‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺖ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﺭﺳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )= ‪(١٠١‬‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ )ﻳﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ :Windows l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Downloads‬‬
‫‪/Images From Canon Camera‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.[Canon‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(١٢٥‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ً‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪ (١٢٥‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Windows 7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫‪.Dock‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؛ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ (١٠٦ =) Image Sync‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻚ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{< ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{< ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]{[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪ (٩٥ – ٩٤=) “WPS‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ“ )=‪.(٩٩ – ٩٨‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﻀﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﺼﺎﻋ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪“WPS‬‬
‫)= ‪.(٩٥ – ٩٤‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[ )= ‪ً (١٠٩‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ )= ‪ً (١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Image Sync‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Image Sync‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{< ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ .GATEWAY‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ ،Image Sync‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬
‫‪.(١٠٦ =) “(Image Sync‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ] [ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ )= ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ )= ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﺼﺎﻋ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >{<‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [3‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.(١١٠ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪(Image Sync‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫)= ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Windows l‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS l‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑـ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ .(٨٧ =) iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [3‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻛﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ“ )= ‪ (٨٩‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ .CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ (٩٤ =) “WPS‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ ،iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼً‪.(١٢٠ = ،‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ‪ .CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٨٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪ (.(١٢‬ﻋﻼﻭﺓً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ[ )= ‪ ،(١١٣‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٩٩ ،٩٦‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )= ‪.(٨٥‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ )= ‪ ،(٩٩ ،٩٦‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ‪ (٨٩ =) CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺷﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‪ [G‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻭ‪ MENU‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(٩٩ ،٩٦‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ .AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >{< )= ‪.(١٠٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.(٩٢ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻬﺎ ًﺯﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[ )= ‪(١٠٩‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[ )= ‪(٩٩ ،٩٦‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[ )= ‪(١١٠‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ : O‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ – ‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻬﺎ ًﺯﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫{‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼ ًﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ )ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٠٩‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<m‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٠٩‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ِ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(٢٢ =) [3‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ً Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ (Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(١١٧ =) [3‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١١٢......................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١١٢ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪١١٢ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪١١٢ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪١١٢ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪١١٣ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١١٣ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ‪١١٣ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١١٤ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪١١٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪١١٤ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪١١٥ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١١٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪١١٦ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ ‪١١٦ ......................‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪١١٧ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١١٧ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪١١٧ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪١١٧ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ (٢٢ =) MENU‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ .[3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ‪ (٢١ =) FUNC.‬ﺃﻭ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ .(٢٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪ (٦٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<o‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(١٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(١٤٣‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ[ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ ،<o><p‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ] [‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﺪﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)= ‪ .(١٩‬ﻭﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫[ )= ‪ (١٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺖ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(١٤٣‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ]‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺸﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻔﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ )= ‪.(١٩‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <p‬ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ (.[3‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<p‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭ]‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪ (١١٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<o><p‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻠﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﻄﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻌﻠﻦ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١١٥‬ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭﻗﺘًﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(١١٥‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪ (0001 – 9999‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ٍ‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢،٠٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻳﻮﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 9999‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0001‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ،0001‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬
‫)ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )= ‪.((١١٥‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪ (١٢٥‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ (١٠٧‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺳﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺪﻡ‪/‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[ft/in‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺒﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[3‬‬
‫• ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ )= ‪(١٢٣‬‬
‫• ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪(١٢٢ =) [HDMI‬‬
‫• ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(٨٣ =) [Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ]ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ[ )= ‪(١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ >‪ <o><p><q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<n‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪] [3‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪ (١١٢‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ[ )= ‪ (١١٣‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬‫)= ‪ (١١٧‬ﻭ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ )= ‪(١٢٣‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )= ‪(٥٥‬‬‫ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪(٤٢‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(٨٣ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪١١٩...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٢٠...................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١٢٠ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٢٠ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪١٢٠ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪١٢١ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٢١.........................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٧..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪١٢١ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ‪١٢٤ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ‪١٢٧ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٢٨ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١٣١ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪١٣١ ...........................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‪١٣٤ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪١٢٥.......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪١٢٥ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ‪١٢٥ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٢٦ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪*CB-2LF/CB-2LFE‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪*NB-11LH‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) USB‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪*(Mini-B :‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪*(D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(AV) AVC-DC400‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪High-Power Flash‬‬
‫‪HF-DC2‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪.(IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻼ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫‪ACK-DC90‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﺤﻖ ﻟﻚ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-11LH‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LF/CB-2LFE‬‬
‫‪High-Power Flash HF-DC2‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻫﻮ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-11LH‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻤﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ S‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ S‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ً NB-11L‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ CB-2LD‬ﻭ‪ً CB-2LDE‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ACK-DC90 AC‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(AV) AVC-DC400‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )= ‪.(١٤٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻻ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٢٫٥‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ D‬ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ٍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDMI CEC‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﺷﻴﺌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ [HDMI‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ[‬
‫)= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ“ )= ‪ (١٢١‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<1‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﺷﻴﺌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ .OK/Select‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ OK/Select‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪) (AV) AVC-DC400‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫)= ‪) .(٥٠ ،٤٤‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <q><r‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫[‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )= ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪.HDMI CEC‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ“ )= ‪ (١٢٢‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (PAL‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.[3‬‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪.(٣٧ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC ACK-DC90‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١١‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺘﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )= ‪.((١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ*‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫• ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪ ISP‬ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫‪http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫‪Windows 8/8.1‬‬
‫‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista SP2‬‬
‫‪Windows XP SP3‬‬
‫‪Mac OS‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.9‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.8‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.7‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“‬
‫)= ‪.(٩٠‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(٩١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ )ﻳﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ :Windows l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،[Canon‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ) (‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ‪،CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪ :Windows 7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Windows Vista‬ﺃﻭ ‪ :XP‬ﻟﺒﺪء ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Downloads Images From‬‬
‫‪/Canon Camera‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ [Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[ ◄‬
‫]‪.[CameraWindow] ◄ [CameraWindow] ◄ [Canon Utilities‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ]‪[CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ‪.Dock‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؛ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ SELPHY CP‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٢٨ – ١٢٧‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ ،[c‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(١٢١‬‬
‫‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ٍ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ )= ‪.(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )= ‪.(١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٢٨‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٢٨‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٧‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ“ )= ‪ (١٢٨‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫>‪.<o><p><q><r‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫>‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]ﻃﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪<q><r‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ L‬ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.٤:٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٣٠ × ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(١٣٠ – ١٢٩‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪،<q><r‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٢٩‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ )= ‪ (١٣٣‬ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪.Digital Print Order Format (DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (١٢٨ – ١٢٧‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ .[2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ )= ‪.(٢٢‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[ ﻭ]ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ‪ CP720/CP730‬ﺃﻭ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺯ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ]ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻬﺮﺱ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ٍ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪.(١٢ =) [3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ“ )= ‪،(١٣٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻯ“ )= ‪ (٧٣‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٣٢‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٣٢‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪،(١٣٣ – ١٣١‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <o><p‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻵﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <m‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٣٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀًﺎ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪ (١٢٥‬ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<m‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٣٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪ l‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١٣٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫‪ l‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪١٣٧........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٤٠.....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٤٣..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‪١٤٣ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‪١٤٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪١٤٥..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٤٥ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٤٦ ........................................................... FUNC.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٤٨ .......................................‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪١٥١ ..........................................‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪١٥١ .........................................‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٥١ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪١٥٢ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪١٥٢......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪١٥٣.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺆ ﱢﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )= ‪ ،(٦٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )= ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ )= ‪.(١٠‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )= ‪.(١١‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )= ‪.(١١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻔﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ً‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓً ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )= ‪.(١١‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻔﺨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺎﻭﻑ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )= ‪.(١٢٣‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫[ )=‪ .(٣٤‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )=‪.(١٢‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ (١٥٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )= ‪.(٣٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ]‪ [h‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ[ )= ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(٦١ =) [h‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(٥٤ =) ISO‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪[IS‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪.(٣٨‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.macro‬‬
‫• ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ‪.(٦١ ،٥٩ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﱡﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )= ‪.(٣٦‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )= ‪ (٣٩‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )= ‪ (٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ؛ ً‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﺟﺮﺏ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(٦١ =) [h‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٥٢‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(٨٠ ،٥٤‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٥٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]![ )= ‪.(٣٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٥٢‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ“‪ ،‬ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪“FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )= ‪.(١٥٠ – ١٤٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺟﺪًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(٢٩‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١٥٥ ،١١٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]![ )= ‪.(٣٣‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(٥٤ =) ISO‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪.(٤٣‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )= ‪.(١١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(٥٤ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )= ‪.(٨٠‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﻲء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )= ‪.(١١٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪.(٣٦‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )= ‪.(١٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺮ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<o‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(١٢٥‬‬
‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪.(١١٥‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )= ‪ (٦٥‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[ )= ‪ ،(١١٢‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ً (٤٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ )= ‪.(١٩‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <1‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <n‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <o‬ﻭ>‪ <m‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[B‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<m‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪/‬ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪٢٠‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ )= ‪.(١٠٩‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ )= ‪.(٨٦‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )= ‪.(٨٩‬‬
‫• ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.(٩٣ ،٩٠ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )= ‪ .(١٥٣‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Image Sync‬ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪ .(١٠٦‬ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺠﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫)= ‪.(١١‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ )= ‪.(١١‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ!‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪/.‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫)= ‪.(١٠١‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )= ‪.(١١‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )= ‪(١١٥‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ )= ‪ (٢‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(١١‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪ (٥١ ،٤١ ،٢٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ .(٨٠ – ٧٨‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪ (٧٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ )= ‪.(١١‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻄﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(١٠‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.(١١٠ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻲ! )= ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ‪ JPEG/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪/.‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪/MOV‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪MP4‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ!‪/‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﻪ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ )*( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ* )= ‪ ،(٧٠‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ* )= ‪ ،(٧١‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ )= ‪ ،(٧٦‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪ (٧٧‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ* )= ‪٧٨‬‬
‫– ‪ ،(٨٠‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ* )= ‪ ،(١٣١‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ* )= ‪.(١٣٤‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺟﻤﻌﻬﺎ )=‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ ،(١٣٣ ،٧٥ ،٧٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (١٣١‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ .(١٣٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (١٣١‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪ (١٣٤‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (٧٢‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ )= ‪ (٧٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪ (٧٧‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (١٣١‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )= ‪.(١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ!‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻠﻮﻍ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫]‪ ،[3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪ (١١٦‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )= ‪.(١١٥‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻮءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ(‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ )‪ (Exx‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (١٢٧‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )= ‪ .(١٢٩‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ WPS‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ُﻌﺮﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣ ﱢ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )= ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫• ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‪/‬ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗُﺤﺠﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪،Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻮﺟﻲ ‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺘﻪ ﻷﻱ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﺗﻜﻔﻲ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ!‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻭﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﻠﻢ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ (١٠٦ =) Image Sync‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ )= ‪(١١٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )= ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫)= ‪(٢٦‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪(٣٠ =) IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )= ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ٍ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫]ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ )= ‪(٢٨‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)= ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(١٤٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )= ‪(٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )= ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫‪(٣٤=) Drive mode‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)= ‪(١١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫)= ‪(٢٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )= ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٦٢‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )= ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ*‬
‫)= ‪(١٥٤‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )= ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ )= ‪(١٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٣١‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪(٥٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )= ‪ ،(٥٧‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫‪(٦١ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪،(١٤٥‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )= ‪(٣٠‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ )= ‪(٦١ ،٣٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫)= ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪(٥٨ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪AE‬‬
‫)= ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(٥٤ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ )= ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،(٥٣ =) AE‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪FE‬‬
‫)= ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ—ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ—ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(١٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)= ‪(١٥٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ )= ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )= ‪ ،(٧٩ ،٥٦‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫)= ‪(٨٠ ،٣٦‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)= ‪(١٢‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )= ‪.(١٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪ <q><r‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )= ‪) (٨٢‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(.<m‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪،(٦٥ ،٢٦‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٥٠‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪(٦٦ =) (GPS‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪(١٤٥‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪،(٥٤ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )= ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )= ‪(٥٥‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٦٩‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٨٠ – ٧٨‬ﻣﻠﺨﺺ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫)= ‪ / (٦٢‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )= ‪،(٣٥‬‬
‫‪) MP4‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪Image Sync‬‬
‫)= ‪(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(١٤٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )= ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ – ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫)= ‪(١١٦‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ /‬ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( )= ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(٦١‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(٨٠ ،٥٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )= ‪(٥٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(.<m‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(.<m‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )= ‪) (٨٢‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(.<m‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ )= ‪(٨١‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ )= ‪((٨٢‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.(١٢٧ =) PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ >‪.<q><r‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥٢‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )= ‪(٦١ ،٣٣‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫!‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪/AE‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪*(٦٢ ،٥٣ =) FE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪(٦١ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )= ‪(٥٧‬‬
‫‪ue‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ‪(٥٨ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪(٢٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [Z‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ FE‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ]![‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )= ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫*‪* ١‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )= ‪(٥٥‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )= ‪(٥٣‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(٥٤ =) ISO‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪3200 / 1600 / 800 / 400 / 200 / 100‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٣٢‬‬
‫][‪$‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٣٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ*‪٣‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ*‪٤‬‬
‫‪(٣٤ =) Drive Mode‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ :٥ – ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ )= ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )= ‪(٣٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )= ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )= ‪(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )= ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪(٥٨ =) AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪*AiAF‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪*(٥٩ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )= ‪(٣١‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪1.6x/2.0x‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪(٣٧ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )= ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ )= ‪(٦٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻭﺳﻂ[‪.‬‬
‫*‪] ٣‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ )= ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(٣٩ ،٣٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )= ‪(٣٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ٤/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ٨/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )= ‪(٣٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ )= ‪(٣٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(٦٣ =) IS‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻧﺸﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫)= ‪(٣٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪/‬ﺑﻼ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪ O‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫= ‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫= ‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫= ‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫= ‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫= ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫= ‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫= ‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫= ‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫= ‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫= ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫= ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫= ‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫= ‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺼﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫= ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫= ‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫= ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫= ‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬
‫= ‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫= ‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫= ‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫= ‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫= ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬
‫= ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫= ‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫= ‪٨٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫= ‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫= ‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫= ‪١١٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫= ‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫= ‪١١٤‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫= ‪١١٤ ،١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫= ‪٧٨‬‬
‫= ‪٧٩‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫= ‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫= ‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫= ‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫= ‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫= ‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪١٣١‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫= ‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫= ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬
‫= ‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬
‫= ‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫= ‪٧١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫= ‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫= ‪٦٨‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪١٢٨‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫= ‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺼﻮﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻕ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺛﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻤﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ‬
‫‪*IEEE 802.11b/g/n‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻲ ‪ ٢٫٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ( ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺿﻌﻔﺎ‪) 4.5 :‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( – ‪ 54.0‬ﱠ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ( ﻣﻢ(‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪) ٢٥ :‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( – ‪ ٣٠٠‬ﱠ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ )‪OFDM (IEEE 802.11g/n‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ )‪DSSS (IEEE 802.11b‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD TFT‬ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٧٫٥‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ٣٫٠‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ٤٦١،٠٠٠ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ*‪ ،١‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ*‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺩﻋﻢ ‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬‬
‫*‪Wi-Fi Certified IBSS ٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ ،Design rule for Camera File system‬ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪) DPOF‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(1.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪Exif 2.3 (JPEG) :‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) MP4 :‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 :‬؛ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪MPEG-4 AAC-LC :‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ((‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ (PC2138/PC2139) ١١ – ١‬ﺃﻭ ‪(PC2052) ١٣ – ١‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻮﺳﻴﻦ )= ‪(١٥٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪،(PIKT/SEA) KSP-APW ،PEW‬‬
‫)‪WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٦‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ(‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪Hi-speed USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻠﻲ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻠﻲ )‪(NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-11LH‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC ACK-DC90‬‬
‫)ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ ٢٢٫٤ × ٥٧٫٦ × ٩٩٫٧ (CIPA‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪ ١٤٧‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ(‬
‫)ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ‪(CIPA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ً‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‬
‫‪ ١٢٠٠ – ٢٥‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫)ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١٫٦‬ﺿﻌ ًﻔﺎ ‪ ٤٨٠٫٠ – ٤٠٫٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺿﻌﻔﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ ٦٠٠٫٠ – ٥٠٫٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ‪ 4:3‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪١٩٠‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ*‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪٢٨٠‬‬
‫‪ ٣٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪Camera & Imaging Products‬‬
‫)‪.Association (CIPA‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪Pixels‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪1058‬‬
‫‪4272‬‬
‫‪16M/4608x3456‬‬
‫‪1705‬‬
‫‪6883‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪(١‬‬
‫‪1996‬‬
‫‪8059‬‬
‫)ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ(‬
‫‪8M/3264x2448‬‬
‫‪3069‬‬
‫‪12391‬‬
‫‪4723‬‬
‫‪19064‬‬
‫‪3M/2048x1536‬‬
‫‪8469‬‬
‫‪34184‬‬
‫)ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ(‬
‫‪27291‬‬
‫‪110150‬‬
‫‪0.3M/640x480‬‬
‫‪40937‬‬
‫‪165225‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪(٢‬‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ .4:3‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٣٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٣٨‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ١٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٨‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ‪ ٠٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ٠٥‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭ‪ ٤٨‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ ١٥‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٣٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٧‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ١٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ] [‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD Speed Class 4‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪(j‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‪(i‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻡ – ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻡ – ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪*e‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠ – ١‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫–‬
‫‪*u‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠٫٥‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪(j‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ – ‪ ٤٫٠‬ﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‪(i‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٠ – ١٫٠‬ﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ]‬
‫[ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪ 2000/1 – 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‬
‫‪) f/10 / f/3.6‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( – ‪ f/20 / f/7.0‬ﱠ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-11LH‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٦‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫‪ ٨٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤٠ – ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٢ × ٤٠٫١ × ٣٤٫٦‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ ١٥‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LF/CB-2LFE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ ٤٫٢‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ٠٫٤١ ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(NB-11LH‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺆﺷﺮﻳﻦ(‬
‫‪ ٤٠ – ٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪٣٥ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪٥٨ ...........................(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪٧٩ ،٥٦ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ← ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫‪) CameraWindow‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ‪١٢٥ ،٩١ .......‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ‪٩٨ ..............................‬‬
‫‪٨٧ ،٨٦ ،٨٤ ......CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ‪٩٣ ...............................‬‬
‫‪١٣١ ................................................. DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪٩١ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ← ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫‪١٢٧ ،١٢١ ................................... PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪٧٩ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪٧٨ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٨٠ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٨٠ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٨ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٥٨ .........................................AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٦٠ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪٣٧ ..................................... AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٦١ ..............................................AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪) CameraWindow‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ(‪٨٩ ..................‬‬
‫‪٣٤ ........................................... Drive mode‬‬
‫‪) Macro‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ( ‪٥٧ .................................‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٥٢ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٤٣ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٠١ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٠٣ ،٨٥ ................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪٨٤ .........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪٨٥ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٤٢ .........................‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٥٨ ............................................... AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٤٣ .................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ← ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٣٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٥٠ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٠٨ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪١١٧ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٣٤ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٤٨ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪١٣٧ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪١١٢ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪٨١ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪١٥٥ ......................................‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ‪٣٨ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪٣١ ،٢٦ ،١٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٣١ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ‪١٢٩ ،٧٨ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪١١٣ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ‪١٠ ،٢ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪١١٧ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ( ‪٥٥ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١١٣ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪٢٣ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ‪٢٤ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪١٤٤ ،١٤٣ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ← ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ‪٧٤ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪٧٢ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٣٩ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١٢٠ .....................................................‬‬
‫← ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫← ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ‪١٢٤ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٢٧ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٦٥ ،١٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٦٨ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٧١ ................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪١٢١ ...............................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪٦٨ ......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪٧٠ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪٦٥ ،١٦ ..........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣُﻜﺒﱠﺮ ‪٧٠ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٦٢ ،٣٣ ............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲء‪٦١ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪٦١ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ‪١٤٥ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪٢٢ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪٧٤ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪٣٩ ،٣٨ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ‪٧٧ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪١٢٠ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٣٢ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٣٣ ............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٤٩ ..................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٤٨ .................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ‪٣٢ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٢٦ ،١٤ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ‪١٢٧ ،١٢٣ ،١٢٢ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪٥٩ ...................................(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪١١٣ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪٣٤ ................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪١٢ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪١١٣ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪١٣ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪١٣ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪٦٠ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﺚ ‪٦٨ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٥٢ ................................................ AE‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪٢ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪١٥٥ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ← SD/SDHC/SDXC‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٤٩ ........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٤٧ .....................‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‪٣٧ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪٧٠ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻤﺰ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٤٨ ........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٤٥ .........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٤٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٤٣ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪٨٠ ،٥٤ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺴﻢ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٤٨ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪٥٨ ....................................................AF‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪٧٦ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١١٦ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪٧١ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪١٤٠ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٨٠ ،٣٦ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٧٨ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٢٨ .............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ‪٥٥ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ‪٥٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺙ‬
‫ﺛﻠﺞ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٤٢ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ← ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٤٣ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٥٤ ............................................... ISO‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪١٢٠ ،٢ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪١٢١ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣُﻜﺒﱠﺮ ‪٧٠ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ‪١٥٢ ،١٤٦ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪٢١ ...........................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٩٢ ...............................................Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٥٣ .................................................... AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٦١ .................................................... AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٦٢ .................................................... FE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪٥٩ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪١٢١ ............................................. HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪١٢٣ ،١٢٠ .................. (AV‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪٥٧ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٤ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٤٤ .............................‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٤٧ ......................‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٥٦ ...................‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪٥٦ ................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪١٠ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪١٤٣ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‪١١٣ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١٩ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪١٢٦ ،١٠٣ ...............‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٥٠ ............‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪٧٢ .......................................................‬‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‪٥٢ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٥٣ ..............................................AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٦٢ ..............................................FE‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ ← ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪١٩ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪٦٦ .................................. GPS‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪٢ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪٥٧ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪١٢٤ ،١٢٠ .................................AC‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٠٦ ،١٠٥ ...................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪٥٣ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻟﻲ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٤٢ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪٦٢ ............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٦٣ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٣٥ ................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪٥٧ ............................................. Macro‬‬
‫ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪٥٧ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٩٨ ................................‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪١٢٤ ،١٢٠ .............................‬‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪٨٣ ..................................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬
‫• ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﻮ ‪.PC2138/PC2139/PC2052‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺩﺉ ﺑـ ‪ .PC‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺪ‪/‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫‪WM224‬‬
‫‪WM223‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ‬‫ﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻘﺎﺏ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ ،WLAN‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﻘﻮﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ‬‫ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﻴﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﺍﺗﻴﺠﻴﺔ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫•‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻠﺪ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪ -‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻛﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻗﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﺮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺴﺎﺋﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻄﺮﻕ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺒﺚ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫‪Complies with‬‬
‫‪IDA Standards‬‬
‫‪DB00671‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ WLAN‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ‪.IDA Singapore‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪١٦٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺻﺎﺭﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺨﺬﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.LAN‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ(‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺻﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺪﻣﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺤﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺘﺤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﺘﺤﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﻫﺠﻮﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻄﻼﻕ )ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺤﺼﻞ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺘﻚ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﺒﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬
‫‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﺗﻀﻔﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ‪ - DPS over IP‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LFE‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪ LED‬ﻣﺘﺠﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Apple Inc.‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ‪ App Store‬ﻭ‪ iPhone‬ﻭ‪ iPad‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC‬‬
‫• ®‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ®‪ Wi-Fi Alliance‬ﻭ™‪ WPA‬ﻭ™‪ WPA2‬ﻭ™‪ Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ NFC Forum, Inc.‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻜﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪• This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard‬‬
‫‪and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding‬‬
‫‪MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and‬‬
‫‪non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the‬‬
‫‪AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted‬‬
‫‪or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising